LG 42LM6200,32LM6690,32LM66900,42LM6710 دفترچه ی راهنما

Add to my manuals
92 Pages

advertisement

LG 42LM6200,32LM6690,32LM66900,42LM6710 دفترچه ی راهنما | Manualzz
OWNER’S MANUAL
LED LCD TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating
your set and retain it for future reference.
LM62**
LM64**
LM66**
LM67**
LM76**
P/NO : MFL67441719 (1205-REV04)
Printed in Korea
www.lg.com
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ENGLISH
ENG
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
Licenses
34
Using the User guide
3
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE
35
MAINTENANCE
35
Cleaning your TV
4
Safety Instructions
10
- Viewing 3D Imaging (Only 3D models)
35
35
- Screen, frame, cabinet and stand
- Power cord
12
Installation Procedure
35TROUBLESHOOTING
12
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
36
12
15
16
17
18
18
21
23
24
Unpacking
Separate purchase
Parts and buttons
Lifting and moving the TV
Setting up the TV
- Attaching the stand
Mounting on a table
Mounting on a wall
Tidying cables
25
MAKING CONNECTIONS
25
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
29
Antenna connection
HDMI connection
DVI to HDMI connection
RGB-PC connection
Component connection
Composite connection
Audio connection
- Digital optical audio connection
USB connection
30REMOTE CONTROL
32
Magic Remote Control
Functions
33
33
33
Registering Magic Remote Control
How to use Magic Remote Control
Precautions to Take when Using the Magic
Remote Control
SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING
yy If you ignore the warning message, you may
be seriously injured or there is a possibility
of accident or death.
CAUTION
yy If you ignore the caution message, you may
be slightly injured or the product may be
damaged.
NOTE
yy The note helps you understand and use
the product safely. Please read the note
carefully before using the product.
LICENSES / OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE
3
Supported licenses may differ by model. For more information about licenses, visit www.lg.com.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a
subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays
DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your
files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered
in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your
registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.
divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.
“DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content.”
“DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or
its subsidiaries and are used under license.”
“Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents :
7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274”
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535
& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol & DTS and
the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+Digital Out is a trademark
of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE
To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL and other open source licenses, that is contained in this
product, please visit http://opensource.lge.com .
In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are
available for download.
LG Electronics will also provide open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of
performing such distribution (such as the cost of media, shipping and handling) upon email request to
[email protected]. This offer is valid for three (3) years from the date on which you purchased the
product.
ENGLISH
ENG
Licenses
4
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ENGLISH
ENG
Safety Instructions
Please read these safety precautions carefully before using the product.
WARNING
Do not place the TV and remote control in the following environments:
yy
--A location exposed to direct sunlight
--An area with high humidity such as a bathroom
--Near any heat source such as stoves and other devices that produce heat
--Near kitchen counters or humidifiers where they can easily be exposed to steam
or oil
--An area exposed to rain or wind
--Near containers of water such as vases
Otherwise, this may result in fire, electric shock, malfunction or product deformation.
Do not place the product where it might be exposed to dust.
yy
This may cause a fire hazard.
Mains plug is the disconnecting device. The plug must remain readily operable.
yy
Do not touch the power plug with wet hands. Additionally, if the cord pin is wet or
yy
covered with dust, dry the power plug completely or wipe dust off.
You may be electrocuted due to excess moisture.
Make sure to connect the power cable to the grounded current. (Except for devices
yy
which are not grounded.)
You may be electrocuted or injured.
Fix the power cable completely.
yy
If the power cable is not fixed completely, a fire can break out.
Ensure the power cord does not come into contact with hot objects such as a
yy
heater.
This may cause a fire or an electric shock hazard.
Do not place a heavy object, or the product itself, on power cables.
yy
Otherwise, this may result in fire or electric shock.
Bend antenna cable between inside and outside building to prevent rain from
yy
flowing in.
This may cause water damaged inside the Product and could give an electric
shock.
When mounting a TV it on the wall, make sure not to install TV by hanging power
yy
and signal cables on the back of the TV.
It may cause fire, electric shock.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Do not drop the product or let it fall over when connecting external devices.
yy
Otherwise, this may result in injury or damage to the product.
Des
icca
nt
Keep the packing anti-moisture material or vinyl packing out of the reach of
yy
children.
Anti-moisture material is harmful if swallowed. If swallowed by mistake, force the
patient to vomit and visit the nearest hospital. Additionally, vinyl packing can cause
suffocation. Keep it out of the reach of children.
Do not let your children climb or cling onto the TV.
yy
Otherwise, the TV may fall over, which may cause serious injury.
Dispose of used batteries carefully to protect a child from eating them.
yy
In case that it eats them, take it to see a doctor immediately.
Do not insert a conductor (like a metal chopstick) into one end of the power cable
yy
while the other end is connected to the input terminal on the wall. Additionally, do
not touch the power cable right after plugging into the wall input terminal.
You may be electrocuted.
(Depending on model)
Do not put or store inflammable substances near the product.
yy
There is a danger of explosion or fire due careless handling of the inflammable
substances.
Do not drop metallic objects such as coins, hair pins, chopsticks or wire into the
yy
product, or inflammable objects such as paper and matches. Children must pay
particular attention.
Electrical shock, fire or injury can occur. If a foreign object is dropped into the
product, unplug the power cord and contact the service centre.
Do not spray water on the product or scrub with an inflammable substance (thinner
yy
or benzene). Fire or electric shock accident can occur.
Do not allow a impact shock or any objects to fall into the product, and do not drop
yy
onto the screen with something.
You may be injured or the product can be damaged.
Never touch this product or antenna during a thunder or lighting storm.
yy
You may be electrocuted.
Never touch the wall outlet when there is leakage of gas, open the windows and
yy
ventilate.
It may cause a fire or a burn by a spark.
ENGLISH
ENG
Do not plug too many electrical devices into a single multiple electrical outlet.
yy
Otherwise, this may result in fire due to over-heating.
5
6
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ENGLISH
ENG
Do not disassemble, repair or modify the product at your own discretion.
yy
Fire or electric shock accident can occur.
Contact the service center for check, calibration or repair.
If any of the following occur, unplug the product immediately and contact your local
yy
service centre.
--The product has been impacted by shock
--The product has been damaged
--Foreign objects have entered the product
--The product produced smoke or a strange smell
This may result in fire or electric shock.
If you don’t intend to use the product for a long time, unplug the power cable from
yy
the product.
Covering dust can cause a fire, or insulation deterioration can cause electric
leakage, electric shock or fire.
Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with
yy
liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Install the product where no radio wave occurs.
yy
There should be enough distance between an outside antenna and power lines to
yy
keep the former from touching the latter even when the antenna falls.
This may cause an electric shock.
Do not install the product on places such as unstable shelves or inclined surfaces.
yy
Also avoid places where there is vibration or where the product cannot be fully
supported.
Otherwise, the product may fall or flip over, which may cause injury or damage to
the product.
If you install the TV on a stand, you need to take actions to prevent the product
yy
from overturning. Otherwise, the product may fall over, which may cause injury.
If you intend to mount the product to a wall, attach VESA standard mounting interface (optional
yy
parts) to the back of the product. When you install the set to use the wall mounting bracket (optional
parts), fix it carefully so as not to drop.
Only use the attachments / accessories specified by the manufacturer.
yy
When installing the antenna, consult a qualified service man.
yy
This may create a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard.
5~7 times
We recommend that you maintain a distance of at least 5 to 7 times the diagonal
yy
screen size when watching TV.
If you watch TV for a long period of time, this may cause blurred vision.
Only use the specified type of battery.
yy
This could cause damage to the remote control.
Do not mix new batteries with old batteries.
yy
This may cause the batteries to overheat and leak.
Make sure there are no objects between the remote control and its sensor.
yy
Signal from the remote control may be disturbed by sun light or other strong light.
yy
In this case, darken the room.
When connecting external devices such as video game consoles, make sure the
yy
connecting cables are long enough.
Otherwise, the product may fall over, which may cause injury or damage the
product.
ENGLISH
ENG
CAUTION
7
8
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ENGLISH
ENG
Do not turn the product On/Off by plugging-in or unplugging the power plug to the
yy
wall outlet. (Do not use the power plug for switch.)
It may cause mechanical failure or could give an electric shock.
Please follow the installation instructions below to prevent the product from
yy
overheating.
--The distance between the product and the wall should be more than 10 cm.
--Do not install the product in a place with no ventilation (e.g., on a bookshelf or in
a cupboard).
--Do not install the product on a carpet or cushion.
--Make sure the air vent is not blocked by a tablecloth or curtain.
Otherwise, this may result in fire.
Take care not to touch the ventilation openings when watching the TV for long
yy
periods as the ventilation openings may become hot. This does not affect the
operation or performance of the product.
Periodically examine the cord of your appliance, and if its appearance indicates damage or
yy
deterioration, unplug it, discontinue use of the appliance, and have the cord replaced with an exact
replacement part by an authorized servicer.
Prevent dust collecting on the power plug pins or outlet.
yy
This may cause a fire hazard.
Protect the power cord from physical or mechanical abuse, such as being twisted,
yy
kinked, pinched, closed in a door, or walked upon. Pay particular attention to plugs,
wall outlets, and the point where the cord exits the appliance.
Do not press strongly upon the panel with a hand or sharp object such as nail,
yy
pencil or pen, or make a scratch on it.
Avoid touching the screen or holding your finger(s) against it for long periods of
yy
time. Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen.
When cleaning the product and its components, unplug the power first and wipe it
yy
with a soft cloth. Applying excessive force may cause scratches or discolouration.
Do not spray with water or wipe with a wet cloth. Never use glass cleaner, car or
industrial shiner, abrasives or wax, benzene, alcohol etc., which can damage the
product and its panel.
Otherwise, this may result in fire, electric shock or product damage (deformation,
corrosion or breakage).
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power
yy
source even if you turn off this unit by SWITCH.
When unplugging the cable, grab the plug and unplug it.
yy
If the wires inside the power cable are disconnected, this may cause fire.
When moving the product, make sure you turn the power off first. Then, unplug the
yy
power cables, antenna cables and all connecting cables.
The TV set or power cord may be damaged, which may create a fire hazard or
cause electric shock.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Contact the service center once a year to clean the internal parts of the product.
yy
Accumulated dust can cause mechanical failure.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the
yy
apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has
been dropped.
If the product feels cold to the touch, there may be a small “flicker” when it is turned
yy
on. This is normal, there is nothing wrong with product.
The panel is a high technology display product with resolution of two million to six
yy
million pixels. You may see tiny black dots and/or brightly coloured dots (red, blue
or green) at a size of 1 ppm on the panel. This does not indicate a malfunction and
does not affect the performance and reliability of the product.
This phenomenon also occurs in third-party products and is not subject to
exchange or refund.
You may find different brightness and color of the panel depending on your viewing
yy
position(left/right/top/down).
This phenomenon occurs due to the characteristic of the panel. It is not related with
the product performance, and it is not malfunction.
Displaying a still image (e.g., broadcasting channel logo, on-screen menu, scene from a video
yy
game) for a prolonged time may cause damage to the screen, resulting in retention of the image,
which is known as image sticking. The warranty does not cover the product for image sticking.
Avoid displaying a fixed image on your television’s screen for a prolonged period (2 or more hours
for LCD, 1 or more hours for Plasma).
Also, if you watch the TV at a ratio of 4:3 for a long time, image sticking may occur on the borders of
the panel.
This phenomenon also occurs in third-party products and is not subject to exchange or refund.
Generated Sound
yy
“Cracking” noise: A cracking noise that occurs when watching or turning off the TV is generated by
plastic thermal contraction due to tempera-ture and humidity. This noise is common for products
where thermal deformation is required. Electrical circuit humming/panel buzzing: A low level noise is
generated from a high-speed switching circuit, which supplies a large amount of current to operate a
product. It varies depending on the product.
This generated sound does not affect the performance and reliability of the product.
ENGLISH
ENG
When moving or unpacking the product, work in pairs because the product is
yy
heavy.
Otherwise, this may result in injury.
9
10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ENGLISH
ENG
Viewing 3D Imaging (Only 3D models)
WARNING
Viewing Environment
yy Viewing Time
-- When watching 3D contents, take 5 - 15 minute breaks every hour. Viewing 3D contents for a long
period of time may cause headache, dizziness, fatigue or eye strain.
Those that have a photosensitive seizure or chronic illness
yy Some users may experience a seizure or other abnormal symptoms when they are exposed to a
flashing light or particular pattern from 3D contents.
yy Do not watch 3D videos if you feel nausea, are pregnant and/ or have a chronic illness such as epilepsy,
cardiac disorder, or blood pressure disease, etc.
yy 3D Contents are not recommended to those who suffer from stereo blindness or stereo anomaly. Double
images or discomfort in viewing may be experienced.
yy If you have strabismus (cross-eyed), amblyopia (weak eyesight) or astigmatism, you may have trouble
sensing depth and easily feel fatigue due to double images. It is advised to take frequent breaks than
the average adult.
yy If your eyesight varies between your right and left eye, revise your eyesight prior to watching 3D
contents.
Symptoms which require discontinuation or refraining from watching 3D contents
yy Do not watch 3D contents when you feel fatigue from lack of sleep, overwork or drinking.
yy When these symptoms are experienced, stop using/watching 3D contents and get enough rest until the
symptom subsides.
-- Consult your doctor when the symptoms persist. Symptoms may include headache, eyeball pain,
dizziness, nausea, palpitation, blurriness, discomfort, double image, visual inconvenience or fatigue.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
11
Viewing Environment
yy Viewing Distance
- Maintain a distance of at least twice the screen diagonal length when watching 3D contents. If you
feel discomfort in viewing 3D contents, move further away from the TV.
Viewing Age
yy Infants/Children
-- Usage/ Viewing 3D contents for children under the age of 5 are prohibited.
-- Children under the age of 10 may overreact and become overly excited because their vision is in
development (for example: trying to touch the screen or trying to jump into it. Special monitoring
and extra attention is required for children watching 3D contents.
-- Children have greater binocular disparity of 3D presentations than adults because the distance
between the eyes is shorter than that of adults. Therefore they will perceive more stereoscopic
depth compared to adults for the same 3D image.
yy Teenagers
-- Teenagers under the age of 19 may react with sensitivity due to stimulation from light in 3D
contents. Advise them to refrain from watching 3D contens for a long time when they are tired.
yy Elderly
-- The elderly may perceive less 3D effect compared to the young. Do not sit closer to the TV than the
recommended distance.
Cautions when using the 3D glasses
yy Make sure to use LG 3D glasses. Otherwise, you may not be able to view 3D videos properly.
yy Do not use 3D glasses instead of your normal glasses, sunglasses or protective goggles.
yy Using modified 3D glasses may cause eye strain or image distortion.
yy Do not keep your 3D glasses in extremely high or low temperatures. It will cause deformation.
yy The 3D glasses are fragile and are easily scratched. Always use a soft, clean piece of cloth when wiping
the lenses. Do not scratch the lenses of the 3D glasses with sharp objects or clean/wipe them with
chemicals.
ENGLISH
ENG
CAUTION
12 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE / ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
yy Image shown may differ from your TV.
yy Your TV’s OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
yy The available menus and options may differ from the input source or product model that you are
using.
yy New features may be added to this TV in the future.
yy The TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And the TV should
be turned off if it will not be watched for some time, as this will reduce energy consumption.
yy The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture
is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
Installation Procedure
1
2
3
4
Open the package and make sure all the accessories are included.
Attach the stand to the TV set.
Connect an external device to the TV set.
Make sure the network connection is available.
You can use the TV network functions only when the network connection is made.
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Unpacking
Check your product box for the following items. If there are any missing accessories, contact the local
dealer where you purchased your product. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual
product and item.
CAUTION
yy Do not use any unapproved items to ensure the safety and product life span.
yy Any damag or injuries caused by using unapproved items are not covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
yy Some models have a thin film attached on to the screen and this must not be removed.
NOTE
yy The items supplied with your product may vary depending on the model.
yy Product specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade
of product functions.
yy For an optimal connection, HDMI cables and USB devices should have bezels less than 10 mm thick
and 18 mm width. Use an extension cable that supports USB 2.0 if the USB cable or USB memory
stick does not fit into your TV’s USB port.
B
B
A
A
*A <
= 10 mm
*B <
= 18 mm
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
TV
SAVING
ENERGY AV MODE INPUT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
FLASHBK
LIST
3D
CH
P
A
G
E
Q.MENU
ENTER
BACK
EXIT
L/R SELECT
FREEZE
RATIO
6
8
9
0
FLASHBK
MARK
FAV
MUTE
MENU INFO
3
5
LIST
MARK
FAV
VOL
2
4
7
TV
SAVING
1
1
Remote control and
batteries (AAA)
(Depending on model)
( See p. 30, 31)
VOL
3D
CH
P
A
G
E
MUTE
MENU INFO
P
Q.MENU
ENTER
BACK
EXIT
L/R SELECT
FREEZE
RATIO
Owner’s manual
Polishing cloth
(Depending on model)
Use this to remove dust
from the cabinet.
Component video cable
( See p. 28)
Composite video cable
( See p. 28)
Cinema 3D Glasses
The number of 3D glasses
may differ depending on
the model or country.
Dual play glasses
(Depending on model)
Cable holder
(Depending on model)
( See p. 24)
Power Cord
(Only
32/37/42/47/55LM62**)
Stand Screws
8EA, M4 x 20
( See p. 18, 19, 20)
Desk-mount Screw
(1EA : Only
32/42/47LM62**,
32/42/47LM669*)
(2EA: Only 32LM64**,
32LM660*, 32LM661*)
( See p. 22)
Desk-mount Cable
2EA
(Only 32LM64**,
32LM660*, 32LM661*)
( See p. 22)
Bracket Screw
2EA, M4 x 8
(Only 32LM64**,
32LM660*, 32LM661*)
( See p. 22)
Wall mount inner spacers
4EA
(Only 32/42/47/55LM62**)
( See p. 24)
or
Isolator
(Depending on model)
( See p. 14)
ENGLISH
ENG
Magic Remote Control,
Batteries (AA)
(Only 60LM645*,
32/42/47/55LM66**,
42/47/55LM67**,
42/47/55LM76**)
( See p. 32)
ENERGY AV MODE INPUT
13
14 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
ENGLISH
ENG
Stand Body / Stand Base
(Only 32/42/47/55/65LM62**, 32/42/47LM669*)
( See p. 18, 20)
Stand Body / Stand Base
(Only 32/42/47/55/60LM64**, 32/42/47/55LM660*, 32/42/47/55LM661*,
42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**)
( See p. 19, 20)
NOTE
yy Antenna Isolator Installation Guide
-- Use this to install TV in a place where there is a voltage difference between TV Set and GND of
antenna signal.
»» If there is a voltage difference between TV Set and GND of antenna signal, the antenna contact
might be heated and excessive heat might cause an accident.
-- You can improve the safety when watching TV by efficiently removing power voltage from TV
antenna. It is recommended to mount the isolator to the wall. If it cannot be mounted to the wall,
mount it on the TV. Avoid disconnecting the antenna Isolator after installation.
-- Before starting, be sure that the TV antenna is connected.
1. Connect to TV.
Wall
ANTENNA/
CABLE IN
Cable / Antenna
or
Isolator
2. Connect to Set-Top box.
Connect one end of the isolator to cable/antenna jack and the other to TV set or set-top box.
“Equipment connected to the protective earthing of the building installation through the mains connection
or through other equipment with a connection to protective earthing - and to a cable distribution system
using coaxial cable, may in some circumstances create a fire hazard. Connection to a cable distribution
system has therefore to be provided through a device providing electrical isolation below a certain
frequency range (galvanic isolator, see EN 60728-11)”
When applying the RF Isolator, a slight loss of signal sensitivity can occur.
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
15
Separate purchase items can be changed or modified for quality improvement without any notification.
Contact your dealer to buy these items.
These devices only work with certain models.
P
AG-F2**DP, AG-F3**DP
Dual play glasses
AG-F2**, AG-F3**
Cinema 3D Glasses
AN-MR300
Magic Remote Control
AN-WF100
Wireless LAN
32/42/47/55/65LM62**,
32/42/47/55LM640*
32/42/47/55LM641*,
60LM645*, 32/42/47/55LM66**,
42/47/55LM67**,
42/47/55LM76**
AG-F2**DP, AG-F3**DP
Dual play glasses
•
•
AG-F2**, AG-F3**
Cinema 3D Glasses
•
AN-MR300
Magic Remote Control
•
AN-WF100
Wireless LAN
•
Compatibility
•
(Depending on model)
•
The model name or design may be changed depending on the upgrade of product functions, manufacturer’s
circumstances or policies.
ENGLISH
ENG
Separate purchase
16 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
ENGLISH
ENG
Parts and buttons
A type : 32/42/47/55/60LM64**,
32/42/47/55LM66**,
42/47/55LM67**,
42/47/55LM76**
B type : 32/42/47/55/65LM62**
Screen
Screen
Remote control and
intelligent sensors1
OK
Power indicator
SETTINGS
Speakers
Speakers
INPUT
Remote control and
intelligent sensors1
Power indicator
OK
SETTINGS
INPUT
Buttons
Touch buttons2
Button
A type
Description
B type
Scrolls
through the saved programmes.
H
H
H
H
H OK
S
H
ꔉ
Adjusts the volume level.
Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input.
SETTINGS Accesses the main menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
INPUT
Changes the input source.
/I
Turns the power on or off.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
2 B type buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger.
NOTE
yy You can set the power indicator light to on or off by selecting OPTION in the main menus.
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Please note the following advice to prevent the
TV from being scratched or damaged and for safe
transportation regardless of its type and size.
at least 2 people.
yy When transporting the TV by hand, hold the TV
as shown in the following illustration.
CAUTION
yy Avoid touching the screen at all times, as
this may result in damage to the screen.
yy It is recommended to move the TV in the box
or packing material that the TV originally came
in.
yy Before moving or lifting the TV, disconnect the
power cord and all cables.
yy When holding the TV, the screen should face
away from you to avoid damage.
yy Hold the top and bottom of the TV frame firmly.
Make sure not to hold the transparent part,
speaker, or speaker grill area.
yy When transporting a large TV, there should be
yy When transporting the TV, do not expose the
TV to jolts or excessive vibration.
yy When transporting the TV, keep the TV upright,
never turn the TV on its side or tilt towards the
left or right.
yy Whenever you handle TV, Protection pad
should be covered with side of TV. (Depending
on model)
Protection Pad
ENGLISH
ENG
Lifting and moving the TV
17
18 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
ENGLISH
ENG
Setting up the TV
Image shown may differ from your TV.
Attaching the stand
42/47LM669*
1
4
M4 x 20
Stand Body
4EA
Front
Stand Base
M4 x 20
Top View
2
4EA
Wrapping bag
5
3
Protection pad
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
19
ENGLISH
ENG
42/47/55LM660*, 42/47/55LM661*, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**
4
1
M4 x 20
Stand Body
4EA
Front
Stand Base
M4 x 20
Top View
2
4EA
Wrapping bag
5
3
Protection pad
20 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
ENGLISH
ENG
32/42/47/55/65LM62**, 32LM669*
32/42/47/55/60LM64**, 32LM660*, 32LM661*
1
1
M4 x 20
M4 x 20
Stand Body
4EA
4EA
Stand Body
Front
Front
Stand Base
Stand Base
Top View
2
2
3
Top View
3
M4 x 20
4EA
M4 x 20
4EA
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
yy When attaching the stand to the TV
set, place the screen facing down on a
cushioned table or flat surface to protect the
screen from scratches.
yy Make sure that the screws are fastened
completely. (If they are not fastened securely
enough, the TV may tilt forward after being
installed.)
Do not fasten the screws with too much
force; otherwise they may be worn out and
get loosened.
Mounting on a table
1 Lift and tilt the TV into its upright position on a
table.
-- Leave a 10 cm (minimum) space from the
wall for proper ventilation.
10 cm
10 cm
m
10 c
10 cm
NOTE
Remove the stand before installing the TV
on a wall mount by performing the stand
attachment in reverse.
2 Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.
CAUTION
yy Do not place the TV near or on sources
of heat, as this may result in fire or other
damage.
ENGLISH
ENG
CAUTION
21
22 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
ENGLISH
ENG
Securing the TV to a table
Fix the TV to a table to prevent from tilting forward,
damage, and potential injury.
To secure the TV to a table, insert and tighten the
supplied screw on the rear of the stand.
(Only 32/42/47LM62**, 32/42/47LM669*)
Adjusting the angle of the TV to suit view
(This feature is not available for all models.)
Adjusting the angle of the TV to suit view
Swivel 20 degrees to the left or right and adjust the
angle of the TV to suit your view.
(Only 32/42/47/55/65LM62**, 32/42/47LM669*)
20
(Only 32LM64**, 32LM660*, 32LM661*)

M4 x 8
2EA
NOTE
(Only 32LM64**, 32LM660*, 32LM661*)
How to fix the TV to a table
1.Connect the Desk-mount Cables to the
Stand Base using the Bracket Screws.
2.Fix the Desk-mount Cables to a table using
the Desk-mount Screws.
3.Once the TV is fixed, move the table close
to the wall. Children may go in, causing
injuries.
WARNING
yy To prevent TV from falling over, the TV
should be securely attached to the floor/
wall per installation instructions. Tipping,
shaking, or rocking the TV may cause injury.
20
Swivel 10 degrees to the left or right and adjust the
angle of the TV to suit your view.
(Only 32/42/47/55/60LM64**, 32/42/47/55LM660*,
32/42/47/55LM661*, 42/47/55LM67**,
42/47/55LM76**)
10
10
CAUTION
When adjusting the angle of the product,
watch out for your fingers.
»»Personal injury may occur if hands or fingers
are pinched. If the product is tilted too much, it
may fall, causing damage or injury.
(Only 32/42/47/55/60LM64**,
32/42/47/55LM660*, 32/42/47/55LM661*,
42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**)
<Rear>
<Front>
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
23
Mounting on a wall
(This feature is not available for all models.)
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be performed
by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
1 Insert and tighten the eye-bolts, or TV brackets
and bolts on the back of the TV.
-- If there are bolts inserted at the eye-bolts
position, remove the bolts first.
2 Mount the wall brackets with the bolts to the
wall.
Match the location of the wall bracket and the
eye-bolts on the rear of the TV.
3 Connect the eye-bolts and wall brackets tightly
with a sturdy rope.
Make sure to keep the rope horizontal with the
flat surface.
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described in
the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
32LM62**
32LM64**
32LM66**
VESA (A x B)
Standard screw
Number of screws
Wall mount bracket
200 x 200
M6
4
LSW200BX
42/47/55LM62**
42/47/55/60LM64**
42/47/55LM66**
42/47/55LM67**
42/47/55LM76**
400 x 400
M6
4
LSW400BX
LSW220BX
LSW420BX
65LM62**
600 x 400
M8
4
LSW600B
LSW620B
CAUTION
yy Make sure that children do not climb on or
hang on the TV.
NOTE
yy Use a platform or cabinet that is strong and
large enough to support the TV securely.
yy Brackets, bolts and ropes are not provided.
You can obtain additional accessories from
your local dealer.
Model
VESA (A x B)
Standard screw
Number of screws
Wall mount bracket
A
B
ENGLISH
ENG
Securing the TV to a wall
24 ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
ENGLISH
ENG
CAUTION
yy Disconnect the power first, and then move
or install the TV. Otherwise electric shock
may occur.
yy If you install the TV on a ceiling or slanted
wall, it may fall and result in severe injury.
Use an authorised LG wall mount and
contact the local dealer or qualified
personnel.
yy Do not over tighten the screws as this may
cause damage to the TV and void your
warranty.
yy Use the screws and wall mounts that meet
the VESA standard. Any damages or injuries
by misuse or using an improper accessory
are not covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
NOTE
yy Use the screws that are listed on the VESA
standard screw specifications.
yy The wall mount kit includes an installation
manual and necessary parts.
yy The wall mount bracket is not provided. You
can obtain additional accessories from your
local dealer.
yy The length of screws may differ depending
on the wall mount. Make sure to use the
proper length.
yy For more information, refer to the manual
supplied with the wall mount.
yy When attaching a third-party wall mounting
bracket to the TV, insert the wall mount inner
spacers into the TV wall mount holes to
move your TV in vertical angle. Please make
sure not to use the spacers for LG wall
mounting bracket. (Only 32/42/47/55LM62**)
Tidying cables
Only 32/42/47/55/65LM62**, 32/42/47LM669*
1 Gather and bind the cables with the Cable
Holder.
Cable Holder
Only 32/42/47/55/60LM64**, 32/42/47/55LM660*,
32/42/47/55LM661*, 42/47/55LM67**,
42/47/55LM76**
1 Gather and bind the cables with the Cable
Management.
2 Fix the Cable Management firmly to the TV.
Cable Holder
Cable Management
CAUTION
Do not move the TV by holding the cable
holders, as the cable holders may break, and
injuries and damage to the TV may occur.
Wall Mount Inner Spacer
(Depending on model)
yy In order to protect the TV screen(scratch,
fingerprint), put TV on flat table without
removing wrapping bag.
yy After removing the wrapping bag on the
back of the TV, install TV according to
manual included in wall mounting bracket
product.
yy Remove protection pads after installing TV.
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Antenna connection
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 Ω).
This section on MAKING CONNECTIONS mainly
uses diagrams for the LM76** models.
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external device’s
connection, refer to the manual provided with each
device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, VCRs, audio systems, USB storage
devices, PC, gaming devices, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yy The external device connection may differ
from the model.
yy Connect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yy If you record a TV program on a DVD
recorder or VCR, make sure to connect the
TV signal input cable to the TV through a
DVD recorder or VCR. For more information
of recording, refer to the manual provided
with the connected device.
yy Refer to the external equipment’s manual for
operating instructions.
yy If you connect a gaming device to the TV,
use the cable supplied with the gaming
device.
yy In PC mode, there may be noise associated
with the resolution, vertical pattern, contrast
or brightness. If noise is present, change
the PC output to another resolution, change
the refresh rate to another rate or adjust the
brightness and contrast on the PICTURE
menu until the picture is clear.
yy In PC mode, some resolution settings may
not work properly depending on the graphics
card.
IN
ANTENNA/CABLE
NOTE
yy Use a signal splitter to use more than 2 TVs.
yy If the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
y
y If the image quality is poor with an antenna
connected, try to realign the antenna in the
correct direction.
y
y An antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ENGLISH
ENG
MAKING
CONNECTIONS
25
26 MAKING CONNECTIONS
Transmits the digital video and audio signals from
an external device to the TV. Connect the external
device and the TV with the HDMI cable as shown.
IN
3
4 (PC)
Choose any HDMI input port to connect. It does
not matter which port you use.
2
DVD/ Blu-Ray / HD Cable
Box / HD STB / PC
1(ARC)
ENGLISH
ENG
HDMI connection
(*Not Provided)
HDMI
NOTE
yy It is recommended to use the TV with the
HDMI connection for the best image quality.
yy Use the latest High Speed HDMI™ Cable
with CEC (Customer Electronics Control)
function.
yy High Speed HDMI™ Cables are tested to
carry an HD signal up to 1080p and higher.
yy Supported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus, HE-AAC
yy Supported HDMI Audio format : Dolby
Digital, PCM (Up to 192 KHz, 32k/44.1k/48k
/88k/96k/176k/192k, DTS Not supported.)
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
An external audio device that supports
yy
SIMPLINK and ARC must be connected
using HDMI IN 1 (ARC) port.
When connected with a high-speed
yy
HDMI cable, the external audio device
that supports ARC outputs optical SPDIF
without additional optical audio cable and
supports the SIMPLINK function.
MAKING CONNECTIONS
27
RGB-PC connection
Transmits the digital video signal from an external
device to the TV. Connect the external device and
the TV with the DVI-HDMI cable as shown. To
transmit an audio signal, connect an audio cable.
Transmits the video signal from PC to the TV. To
transmit an audio signal, connect an audio cable.
4 (PC)
Choose any HDMI input port to connect. It does
not matter which port you use.
(PC)
IN
(RGB/HDMI-PC)
AUDIO
IN
3
RGB
2
(*Not Provided)
IN
AUDIO
1(ARC)
(RGB/HDMI-PC)
RGB OUT (PC) AUDIO OUT
PC
(*Not Provided)
AUDIO OUT
DVI OUT
DVD/ Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box / PC
NOTE
yy Depending on the graphics card, DOS mode
may not work if a HDMI to DVI Cable is in
use.
y
y It is recommended to connect the DVI-HDMI to
HDMI IN 4.
ENGLISH
ENG
DVI to HDMI connection
28 MAKING CONNECTIONS
ENGLISH
ENG
Component connection
Composite connection
Transmits analog video and audio signals from an
external device to the TV. Connect the external
device and the TV with a component cable as
shown.
Transmits analog video and audio signals from an
external device to the TV. Connect the external
device and the TV with the composite cable as
shown.
IN
AV
VIDEO
PR
(Use the composite
video cable provided.)
YELLOW
PB
AV
Y
VIDEO
(Use the component
video cable provided.)
GREEN
(Use the composite video
cable provided.)
COMPONENT
PR
RED
RED
WHITE
BLUE
(*Not Provided)
(*Not Provided)
RED
WHITE
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
GREEN
RED
WHITE
L
Y
PB
WHITE
BLUE
GREEN
VCR / DVD / Blu-Ray
/ HD Cable Box
AUDIO
YELLOW
YELLOW YELLOW
GREEN
RED
RED
RED
WHITE
RED
WHITE
YELLOW
DVD / Blu-Ray /
HD Cable Box
IN
COMPONENT
AUDIO
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
NOTE
yy If cables are installed incorrectly, it could
cause the image to display in black and
white or with distorted colour.
VIDEO
L (MONO) AUDIO R
MAKING CONNECTIONS
29
USB connection
You may use an optional external audio system
instead of the built-in speaker.
Connect a USB storage device such as a USB
flash memory, external hard drive, or a USB
memory card reader to the TV and access the
Smart Share menu to use various multimedia files.
NOTE
3 USB Apps
yy If you use an optional external audio device
instead of the built-in speaker, set the TV
speaker feature to off.
Digital optical audio connection
USB IN
2 USB Hub
Hub
HDD
1 HDD IN
Transmits a digital audio signal from the TV to an
external device. Connect the external device and
the TV with the optical audio cable as shown.
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO
(*Not Provided)
(*Not Provided)
NOTE
yy To use a USB Hub device, make sure that it
is connected to the USB IN 2 USB Hub port.
yy Some USB Hubs may not work. If a USB
device connected using a USB Hub is not
detected, connect it to the USB port on the
TV directly.
(*Not Provided)
Digital Audio System
USB
OPTICAL AUDIO IN
NOTE
yy Do not look into the optical output port.
Looking at the laser beam may damage
your vision.
yy Audio with ACP (Audio Copy Protection)
function may block digital audio output.
ENGLISH
ENG
Audio connection
30 REMOTE CONTROL
ENGLISH
ENG
REMOTE CONTROL
(Depending on model)
The descriptions in this manual are based on the buttons on the remote control.
Please read this manual carefully and use the TV correctly.
To replace batteries, open the battery cover, replace batteries (1.5 V AAA) matching
the
and
ends to the label inside the compartment, and close the battery cover.
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse.
CAUTION
yy Do not mix old and new batteries, as this may damage the remote control.
yy In Analogue TV and some countries, some remote control keys may not work.
Make sure to point the remote control toward the remote control sensor on the TV.
(Only LM669*)
3D
Used for viewing 3D video.
TV/RAD
TV/RAD
Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme.
GUIDE
Shows programme guide.
INFO
Views the information of the current
programme and screen.
SUBTITLE
Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
Q. MENU
Accesses the quick menus.
INPUT
Changes the input source.
LIST
Accesses the saved programme list.
Q.VIEW
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
HOME
Accesses the Home menus.
MY APPS
Shows the list of Apps.
Navigation buttons (up/down/left/right)
Scrolls through menus or options.
OK
Selects menus or options and confirms your
input.
(Back)
Returns to the previous level.
POWER
GUIDE
INFO
SUBTITLE
Q.MENU
EXIT
Clears on-screen displays and return to TV
viewing.
FAV
Accesses your favourite programme list.
INPUT
(User Guide)
Sees user-guide.
Q.VIEW
LIST
HOME
MY APPS
EXIT
FAV
P
MUTE
1
P
A
G
E
LIVE TV
REC
TEXT
T.OPT
2
PAGE
Moves to the previous or next screen.
1 Colour buttons
These access special functions in some
menus.
( : Red,
: Green,
: Yellow,
: Blue)
LIVE TV
Return to LIVE TV.
Control buttons (
)
Controls the Premium contents, DVR or
Smart Share menus or the SIMPLINK
compatible devices (USB or SIMPLINK or
DVR).
REC
Uses to adjust DVR menu.
2 TELETEXT BUTTONS
These buttons are used for teletext.
REMOTE CONTROL
31
(User Guide)
Sees user-guide.
EXIT
Clears on-screen displays and return to TV
viewing.
RATIO
Resizes an image.
RATIO
INPUT
Changes the input source.
TV/
RAD
TV/RAD
Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme.
LIST
Accesses the saved programme list.
Q.VIEW
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
FAV
Accesses your favourite programme list.
3D
Used for viewing 3D video.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LIST
0
Q.VIEW
P
A
G
E
MUTE
SETTINGS
MY APPS
OK
HOME
Accesses the Home menus.
(Back)
Returns to the previous level.
GUIDE
Shows programme guide.
2 TELETEXT BUTTONS
These buttons are used for teletext.
SUBTITLE
Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital
mode.
FAV
PAGE
Moves to the previous or next screen.
SETTINGS
Accesses the main menus.
MY APPS
Shows the list of Apps.
Navigation buttons (up/down/left/right)
Scrolls through menus or options.
OK
Selects menus or options and confirms your
input.
1 Colour buttons
These access special functions in some
menus.
( : Red,
: Green,
: Yellow,
:
Blue)
INPUT
1
2
GUIDE
EXIT
T.OPT
Q.MENU
SUBTITLE
TEXT
LIVE TV
REC
ENERGY
INFO
SAVING
Q. MENU
Accesses the quick menus.
LIVE TV
Return to LIVE TV.
Control buttons (
)
Controls the Premium contents, DVR or
Smart Share menus or the SIMPLINK
compatible devices (USB or SIMPLINK or
DVR).
REC
Uses to adjust DVR menu.
ENERGY SAVING
Adjusts the brightness of the screen to reduce
energy consumption.
INFO
Views the information of the current
programme and screen.
SIMPLINK
Accesses the AV devices connected with the
HDMI cable through HDMI-CEC.
Opens the SIMPLINK menu.
ENGLISH
ENG
(Only LM62**, LM64**, LM660*, LM661*, LM67**, LM76**)
32 Magic Remote Control Functions
ENGLISH
ENG
Magic Remote Control Functions
This item is not included for all models.
When the message “Magic Remote Control battery is low. Change the battery.” is
displayed, replace the battery.
To replace batteries, open the battery cover, replace batteries (1.5 V AA) matching
and ends to the label inside the compartment, and close the battery cover. Be
sure to point the remote control toward the remote control sensor on the TV.
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse.
CAUTION
yy Do not mix old and new batteries, as this may damage the remote control.
(Only 60LM645*, 32/42/47/55LM66**,42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**)
Pointer (RF transmitter)
(POWER)
Turns the TV on or off.
BACK
Returns to the previous level.
BACK
HOME
HOME
Accesses the Home menu.
Navigation buttons (up/down/
left/right)
Scrolls through menus or
options.
Wheel(OK)
Selects menus or options and
confirms your input.
Scrolls through the saved
programmes.
If you press the navigation
button while moving the pointer
on the screen, the pointer
disappears, and the Magic
Remote Control works as a
regular remote control.
To display the pointer again,
shake the Magic Remote
Control from side to side.
P
MY APPS
+
Adjusts the volume level.
ꕌPꕍ
Scrolls through the saved
programmes or channels.
MUTE
Mutes all sounds.
MY APPS
Shows the list of Apps.
3D
Used for viewing 3D video.
11-1 Brief Info Title Test...
Info.
1
If you press Wheel(OK) on the Magic Remote
Control, the following screen appears.
Shows information about the current
programmes and screen.
Pressing this button will display number keypad
My Apps
3
2 which you can select programme number.
3 You can select My Apps Menu.
Magic Remote Control Functions
It is necessary to ‘pair’ (register) the magic remote
control to your TV before it will work.
BACKto register
HOME
How
the Magic Remote Control
P
MY APPS
1 To register automatically,
turn the TV on and press the
Wheel(OK) button. When
registration is completed, the
completion message appears
on the screen.
2 If registration fails, turn the TV
off and back on, then press
the Wheel(OK) button to
complete registration.
How to re-register the Magic Remote Control
BACK
HOME
1 Press and hold the BACK
and HOME buttons together
for 5 seconds to reset, then
register it by following “How
to register the Magic Remote
Control” above.
2 To re-register the Magic
Remote Control, press and
hold the BACK button for 5
seconds toward the TV. When
registration is completed, the
completion message appears
on the screen.
How to use Magic Remote
Control
1 If the pointer disappears, move
the Magic Remote Control
slightly to left or right. Then, it
will automatically appear on
the screen.
»»If the pointer has not been
used for a certain period of
time, it will disappear.
2 You can move the pointer by
aiming the Pointer Receiver of
the Magic Remote Control at
your TV then move it left, right,
up or down.
»»If the pointer does not work
properly, leave the Magic
Remote Control for 10
seconds then use it again.
Precautions to Take when
Using the Magic Remote
Control
Use the Magic Remote Control within the
yy
maximum communication distance (10 m).
Using the Magic Remote Control beyond this
distance, or with an object obstructing it, may
cause a communication failure.
A communication failure may occur due to
yy
nearby devices. Electrical devices such as
a microwave oven or wireless LAN product
may cause interference, as these use the
same bandwidth (2.4 GHz) as the Magic
Remote Control.
The Magic Remote Control may be damaged
yy
or may malfunction if it is dropped or receives
a heavy impact.
Take care not to bump into nearby furniture
yy
or other people when using the Magic
Remote Control.
Manufacturer and installer cannot provide
yy
service related to human safety as the
applicable wireless device has possibility of
electric wave interference.
It is recommended that an Access Point (AP)
yy
be located more than 1 m away from the
TV. If the AP is installed closer than 1 m, the
Magic Remote Control may not perform as
expected due to frequency interference.
ENGLISH
ENG
Registering Magic Remote
Control
33
34 USING THE USER GUIDE
ENGLISH
ENG
Using the User guide
User Guide allows you to more easily access the detailed TV information.
1 Press the HOME button to access the HOME
menu.
2 Select User Guide and press Wheel(OK).
1
User Guide
OPTION > To set language
HOME  Settings  OPTION  Language
Selects Menu Language and Audio Language displayed on the screen.
Menu Language Selects a language for the display text.
PROGRAMME Setting
[In Digital Mode Only]
Audio Language When watching a digital broadcast containing several
audio languages, you can select the language you want.
PICTURE, SOUND Setting
Subtitle
Language
OPTION
[In Digital Mode Only]
Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle
languages are broadcast.
✎ If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast,
the default language subtitle will be displayed.
LG SMART Function
Advanced Function
2
Information
My Apps
Input List
Settings
Live TV
Search
Internet
3D
LG Smart W Programme Guide User Guide

yy You can also access the User Guide by
pressing (User Guide) in the remote
control.
4
3
To use Energy Saving feature
To set time options
PICTURE, SOUND Setting
OPTION
Disabled Assistance
Advanced Function
Information
To set TV lock options
To set language
LG SMART Function
2
Close
Menu Language Selects a language for the display text.
[In Digital Mode Only]
Audio Language When watching a digital broadcast containing several
audio languages, you can select the language you want.
[In Digital Mode Only]
Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle
Subtitle
languages are broadcast.
Language
✎ If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast,
the default language subtitle will be displayed.
Try Now
To set Magic Remote Control
1
Shows the current watching programme or
input source screen.
2
Allows to select the category you want.
3
Allows to select the item you want.
You can use ꕌ/ꕍto move between pages.
4
Allows to browse the description of the
function you want from the index.
3
Zoom Out
Close
1
Shows the description of the selected menu.
You can use ꕌ/ꕍto move between pages.
2
Moves to the selected menu directly from the
User Guide.
3
Zooms in or out the screen.
To use input device
PROGRAMME Setting
Zoom In
HOME  Settings  OPTION  Language
Selects Menu Language and Audio Language displayed on the screen.
NOTE
1
3
Recent List
User Guide
User Guide
Try Now
MAINTENANCE / TROUBLESHOOTING
35
Cleaning your TV
Clean your TV regularly to keep the best performance and to extend the product lifespan.
CAUTION
yy Make sure to turn the power off and disconnect the power cord and all other cables first.
yy When the TV is left unattended and unused for a long time, disconnect the power cord from the wall
outlet to prevent possible damage from lightning or power surges.
Screen, frame, cabinet and stand
yy To remove dust or light dirt, wipe the surface with a dry, clean, and soft cloth.
yy To remove major dirt, wipe the surface with a soft cloth dampened in clean water or a diluted mild
detergent. Then wipe immediately with a dry cloth.
CAUTION
yy Avoid touching the screen at all times, as this may result in damage to the screen.
yy Do not push, rub, or hit the screen surface with your fingernail or a sharp object, as this may result in
scratches and image distortions.
yy Do not use any chemicals as this may damage the product.
yy Do not spray liquid onto the surface. If water enters the TV, it may result in fire, electric shock, or
malfunction.
Power cord
Remove the accumulated dust or dirt on the power cord regularly.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Solution
Cannot control
the TV with the
remote control.
yy Check the remote control sensor on the product and try again.
yy Check if there is any obstacle between the product and the remote control.
to , to ).
yy Check if the batteries are still working and properly installed (
No image display
and no sound is
produced.
yy Check if the product is turned on.
yy Check if the power cord is connected to a wall outlet.
yy Check if there is a problem in the wall outlet by connecting other products.
The TV turns off
suddenly.
yy Check the power control settings. The power supply may be interrupted.
yy Check if the Auto sleep feature is activated in the Time settings.
yy If there is no signal while the TV is on, the TV will turn off automatically after
15 minutes of inactivity.
When connecting
to the PC (RGB/
HDMI DVI),
‘No signal’ or
‘Invalid Format’ is
displayed.
yy Turn the TV off/on using the remote control.
yy Reconnect the RGB/HDMI cable.
yy Restart the PC with the TV on.
ENGLISH
ENG
MAINTENANCE
36 SPECIFICATIONS
ENGLISH
ENG
SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product functions.
(Only 32/42/47/55LM641*, 60LM645*, 32/42/47/55LM66**, 42/47/55LM67**, 42/47/55LM76**)
Wireless LAN module (WN8122E) specification
Standard
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n
2400 to 2483.5 MHz
Frequency Range
5150 to 5250 MHz
5725 to 5850 MHz
Modulation
CCK / OFDM / MIMO
802.11a: 14 dBm
Output Power
(Typical)
802.11b: 17 dBm
802.11g: 15 dBm
802.11n - 2.4GHz: 13.5 dBm
802.11n - 5GHz: 12 dBm
802.11a/g: 54 Mbps
Data rate
802.11b: 11 Mbps
802.11n: 300 Mbps
Antenna Gain
(Typical)
Occupied bandwidth
2400 to 2483.5 MHz: -0.79dBi
5150 to 5250 MHz: 0.62dBi
5725 to 5850 MHz: 0.52dBi
802.11a/b/g: HT20
802.11n: HT20/40
Because band channel used by the country could be different, the user can not change or adjust the
yy
operating frequency and this product is set for the regional frequency table.
Bluetooth module (BM-LDS302) specification
Standard
Frequency Range
Output Power (Max.)
Data rate (Max.)
Communication Distance
Bluetooth Version 3.0
2400 ~ 2483.5 MHz
10 dBm or lower
3 Mbps
Line of Open Sight approx. 10 m
SPECIFICATIONS
37
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
With stand (mm)
Weight
With stand (kg)
Power requirement
MODELS
Weight
With stand (mm)
Without stand (kg)
MODELS
Weight
47LM62**
42LM6200-TA
42LM620Y-TA
47LM6200-TA
47LM620Y-TA
746.0 x 528.0 x 204.0
979.0 x 660.0 x 269.0
1089.0 x 722.0 x 269.0
979.0 x 594.0 x 35.5
1089.0 x 655.0 x 35.5
15.6
18.1
13.1
15.6
8.5
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
55LM62**
65LM62**
55LM6200-TA
55LM620Y-TA
65LM6200-TA
65LM620Y-TA
1263.0 x 822.0 x 315.0 1539.0 x 993.0 x 354.0
Without stand(mm) 1263.0 x 754.0 x 35.5
25.5
With stand (kg)
Power requirement
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
42LM62**
Without stand(mm) 746.0 x 462.0 x 35.5
9.8
Without stand (kg)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
32LM62**
32LM6200-TA
32LM620Y-TA
With stand (mm)
21.9
Power requirement
MODELS
With stand (mm)
45.8
40.6
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
32LM64**
42LM64**
47LM64**
32LM6400-TA
32LM640Y-TA
32LM6410-TB
32LM641Y-TB
42LM6400-TA
42LM640Y-TA
42LM6410-TB
42LM641Y-TB
47LM6400-TA
47LM640Y-TA
47LM6410-TB
47LM641Y-TB
729.0 x 502.0 x 225.0
964.0 x 644.9 x 263.0
1073.0 x 705.0 x 263.0
964.0 x 577.7 x 35.7
1073.0 x 639.0 x 35.7
14.3
16.9
12.1
14.7
Without stand(mm) 729.0 x 444.0 x 35.9
9.4
With stand (kg)
Without stand (kg)
1539.0 x 924.0 x 38.1
7.8
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
55LM64**
60LM64**
55LM6400-TA
55LM640Y-TA
55LM6410-TB
55LM641Y-TB
60LM6450-TA
60LM645Y-TA
32LM660*
32LM6600-TA
32LM660Y-TA
1243.2 x 799.5 x 331.0 1391.1 x 905.2 x 334.7 855.0 x 587.0 x 225.0
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Without stand(mm) 1243.2 x 735.0 x 36.0
Weight
With stand (kg)
Without stand (kg)
1391.1 x 835.5 x 52.5
855.0 x 524.0 x 35.6
24.7
42.6
9.5
21.0
38.5
8.0
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
MODELS
32LM661*
32LM669*
42LM660*
32LM6610-TB
32LM661Y-TB
32LM6690-TC
32LM669Y-TC
42LM6600-TA
42LM660Y-TA
855.0 x 587.0 x 225.0
719.0 x 499.0 x 204.0
953.0 x 636.0 x 263.0
719.0 x 435.0 x 35.6
953.0 x 566.0 x 33.4
9.5
14.8
8.0
12.6
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
With stand (mm)
Without stand(mm) 855.0 x 524.0 x 35.6
9.5
With stand (kg)
Without stand (kg)
Power requirement
8.0
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
ENGLISH
ENG
Product specifications may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product functions.
For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
38 SPECIFICATIONS
ENGLISH
ENG
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
With stand (mm)
42LM661*
42LM669*
47LM660*
42LM6610-TB
42LM661Y-TB
42LM6690-TC
42LM669Y-TC
47LM6600-TA
47LM660Y-TA
953.0 x 636.0 x 263.0
953.0 x 627.0 x 269.0
1063.0 x 701.0 x 263.0
953.0 x 566.0 x 33.4
1063.0 x 628.0 x 33.4
15.1
17.4
12.6
15.2
Without stand(mm) 953.0 x 566.0 x 33.4
14.8
With stand (kg)
Without stand (kg)
Power requirement
12.6
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
47LM661*
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
47LM6610-TB
47LM661Y-TB
With stand (mm)
Power requirement
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
With stand (mm)
1063.0 x 628.0 x 33.4
1232.0 x 723.0 x 33.6
17.7
25.0
15.2
21.3
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
42LM67**
47LM67**
55LM67**
42LM6700-TA
42LM6710-TB
42LM670Y-TA
42LM671Y-TB
47LM6700-TA
47LM6710-TB
47LM670Y-TA
47LM671Y-TB
55LM6700-TA
55LM6710-TB
55LM670Y-TA
55LM671Y-TB
953.0 x 636.0 x 263.0
1063.0 x 701.0 x 263.0 1232.0 x 795.0 x 331.0
1063.0 x 628.0 x 33.4
1232.0 x 723.0 x 33.6
With stand (kg)
17.5
25.0
Without stand (kg)
12.6
15.3
21.3
With stand (mm)
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
42LM76**
47LM76**
55LM76**
42LM7600-TA
42LM7610-TB
42LM760Y-TA
42LM761Y-TB
47LM7600-TA
47LM7610-TB
47LM760Y-TA
47LM761Y-TB
55LM7600-TA
55LM7610-TB
55LM760Y-TA
55LM761Y-TB
953.0 x 636.0 x 263.0
1063.0 x 701.0 x 263.0
1232.0 x 795.0 x 331.0
1063.0 x 628.0 x 33.4
1232.0 x 723.0 x 33.6
17.5
25.0
15.3
21.3
Without stand(mm) 953.0 x 566.0 x 33.4
15.0
With stand (kg)
Without stand (kg)
Power requirement
Environment
condition
47LM6690-TC
47LM669Y-TC
14.8
MODELS
Weight
15.2
Without stand(mm) 953.0 x 566.0 x 33.4
Power requirement
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
55LM66**
55LM6600-TA
55LM6610-TB
55LM660Y-TA
55LM661Y-TB
1063.0 x 701.0 x 263.0 1063.0 x 692.0 x 269.0 1232.0 x 795.0 x 331.0
Without stand(mm) 1063.0 x 628.0 x 33.4
17.4
With stand (kg)
Without stand (kg)
47LM669*
12.8
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Operating Temperature
0 °C to 40 °C
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60 °C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
SPECIFICATIONS
Television System
Programme
Coverage
Australia
Television System
Programme
Coverage
Indonesia,
Israel, Myanmar,
Sri Lanka
Television System
Programme
Coverage
Vietnam,
Malaysia
Television System
Programme
Coverage
Iran, Algeria,
Tunisia, Digital
model
Television System
Programme
Coverage
Analogue model,
India, Thailand,
South Africa--
Television System
Programme
Coverage
External Antenna
Impedance
Analogue TV
DVB-T
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I
UHF 21 to 69
DVB-T
VHF 06 to 12,
UHF 27 to 69
DVB-T
UHF 21 to 69
DVB-T
VHF 6 to 12,
UHF 21 to 69
DVB-T
VHF 5 to 12,
UHF 21 to 69
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
PAL B/B
B/B : VHF/UHF 0 to 75, CATV : 2 to
44
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
-
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
-
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
75 Ω
75 Ω
ENGLISH
ENG
New Zealand,
Singapore
Digital TV
39
40 SPECIFICATIONS
ENGLISH
ENG
HDMI/DVI-DTV supported mode
Component port connecting information
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
Vertical
Frequency
(Hz)
720X480
31.469
31.5
59.94
60
720X576
31.25
50
1280X720
37.5
44.96
45
50
59.94
60
1920X1080
33.72
33.75
28.125
26.97
27
33.716
33.75
56.25
67.43
67.5
59.94
60
50
23.97
24
29.976
30.00
50
59.94
60
Component ports on
the
TV
Y
PB
PR
Video output ports
on DVD player
Y
Y
Y
Y
PB
B-Y
Cb
Pb
PR
R-Y
Cr
Pr
Signal
Component
480i/576i
O
480p/576p
O
720p/1080i
O
1080p
O
(50 Hz / 60 Hz only)
SPECIFICATIONS
41
Video, which is input as below media contents is switched into the 3D screen automatically.
yy
3D supported mode automatically
Input
Signal
640 X 480
480p
576p
720p
HDMI
1080i
1080p
Horizontal
Vertical
Frequency (kHz) Frequency (Hz)
31.469 / 31.5
62.938 / 63
31.469 / 31.5
59.94 / 60
62.938 / 63
31.25
62.5
50
37.50
50
44.96 / 45
59.94 / 60
75
50
89.91 / 90
59.94 / 60
28.125
50
33.72 / 33.75
59.94 / 60
56.25
50
67.5
59.94 / 60
26.97 / 27
23.97 / 24
28.125
25
33.72 / 33.75
29.976 / 30
43.94 / 54
23.97 / 24
56.25
25
67.432 / 67.5
29.976 / 30
56.25
50
67.432 / 67.5
59.94 / 60
USB
1080p
33.75
30
DLNA
1080p
33.75
30
Playable 3D video format
Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full)
Frame Packing, Line Alternative
Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full)
Frame Packing, Line Alternative
Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full)
Frame Packing, Line Alternative
Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full)
Frame Packing, Line Alternative
Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full)
Frame Packing, Field Alternative
Top & Bottom,
Side by Side(Half), Side by Side(Full)
Frame Packing, Line Alternative
Top & Bottom, Side by Side(Half)
Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Checker Board, MPO(Photo), JPS(Photo)
ENGLISH
ENG
3D supported mode
42 SPECIFICATIONS
ENGLISH
ENG
For models supporting WiDi, you can set the 3D mode in the same way as in RGB (PC) mode.
yy
3D supported mode manually
Input
Signal
720p
1080i
HDMI-DTV
1080p
HDMI-PC
RGB-PC
Horizontal
Vertical
Frequency (kHz) Frequency (Hz)
37.50
50
45.00
60
28.12
50
33.75
60
27.00
24
28.12
25
33.75
30
56.25
50
67.50
60
1024x768
48.36
1360x768
47.71
1920x1080
67.50
Others
1024x768
1360x768
48.36
47.71
1920x1080
67.50
Others
720p
1080i
Component
1080p
Playable 3D video format
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Single Frame Sequential
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Checker Board
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Checker Board, Single Frame Sequential,
Row Interleaving, Column Interleaving
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom
60
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom,
Checker Board, Single Frame Sequential,
Row Interleaving, Column Interleaving
-
2D to 3D
60
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom
-
-
2D to 3D
37.50
50
45.00
60
28.12
50
33.75
60
27.00
24
28.12
25
33.75
30
56.25
50
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom
67.50
60
Others
-
-
2D to 3D
USB
1080p
33.75
30
DLNA
1080p
33.75
30
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half),Top & Bottom,
Checker Board, Row Interleaving, Column
Interleaving(Photo : Side by Side(Half),
Top & Bottom)
DTV
Signal
Playable 3D video format
HD
2D to 3D, Side by Side(Half), Top & Bottom
SD
2D to 3D
(Only DTV)
Record the model number and serial number of
the TV.
Refer to the label on the back cover and quote
this information to your dealer when requiring any
service.
MODEL
SERIAL
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ ‪45‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ ‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
42
.‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬RGB (PC) ‫ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬3 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬،‫ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬WiDi ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
3D supported mode manually
Vertical
Horizontal
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (kHz)
Signal
Input
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
Playable 3D video format
HDMI-DTV
HDMI-PC
RGB-PC
Component
USB
DLNA
Signal
HD
SD
DTV
41 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
3D ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
.‫ ﺑﻌﺪی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬3 ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
3D supported mode automatically
Playable 3D video format
Vertical
Horizontal
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (kHz)
Signal
Input
HDMI
USB
DLNA
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪HDMI/DVI-DTV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻘﯽ)ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩی)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪PB‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪480x720‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.5‬‬
‫‪59.94‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪PB‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪576x720‬‬
‫‪31.25‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪B-Y‬‬
‫‪R-Y‬‬
‫‪720x1280‬‬
‫‪37.5‬‬
‫‪44.96‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪59.94‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪Cb‬‬
‫‪Cr‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪Pb‬‬
‫‪Pr‬‬
‫‪1080x1920‬‬
‫‪33.72‬‬
‫‪33.75‬‬
‫‪28.125‬‬
‫‪26.97‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪33.716‬‬
‫‪33.75‬‬
‫‪56.25‬‬
‫‪67.43‬‬
‫‪67.5‬‬
‫‪59.94‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪23.97‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪29.976‬‬
‫‪30.00‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪59.94‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫‪480i/576i‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪480p/576p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪720p/1080i‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪1080p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٦٠ /‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
39 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I
DVB-T
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
PAL B/B
B/B : VHF/UHF 0 to 75, CATV : 2 to
44
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
UHF 21 to 69
DVB-T
VHF 06 to 12,
UHF 27 to 69
DVB-T
UHF 21 to 69
DVB-T
VHF 6 to 12,
UHF 21 to 69
DVB-T
VHF 5 to 12,
UHF 21 to 69
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
،‫ ﺍﺳﺮﺍﻳﻴﻞ‬،‫ﺍﻧﺪﻭﻧﺰی‬
‫ ﺳﺮﻳﻼﻧﻜﺎ‬،‫ﺑﺮﻣﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﻟﺰی‬،‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻡ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
،‫ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﻳﺮﻩ‬،‫ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬،‫ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
-
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
BG : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
I : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
DK : VHF/UHF 1 to 69, CATV 01 to 47
M : VHF/UHF 2 to 78, CATV 01 to 71
-
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
75 Ω
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
PAL/SECAM-B/G/D/K, PAL-I, NTSC-M
75 Ω
‫ ﺳﻨﮕﺎﭘﻮﺭ‬،‫ﺯﻻﻧﺪﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﯽ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﺪﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‬، ‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ‬
‫ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎی‬، ‫ ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ‬،
--‫ﺟﻨﻮﺑﯽ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫*‪42LM661‬‬
‫*‪42LM669‬‬
‫*‪47LM660‬‬
‫‪42LM6610-TB‬‬
‫‪42LM661Y-TB‬‬
‫‪42LM6690-TC‬‬
‫‪42LM669Y-TC‬‬
‫‪47LM6600-TA‬‬
‫‪47LM660Y-TA‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪263.0 x 636.0 x 953.0‬‬
‫‪269.0 x 627.0 x 953.0‬‬
‫‪263.0 x 701.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪33.4 x 566.0 x 953.0‬‬
‫‪33.4 x 566.0 x 953.0‬‬
‫‪33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪14.8‬‬
‫‪15.1‬‬
‫‪17.4‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪12.6‬‬
‫‪12.6‬‬
‫‪15.2‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫*‪47LM661‬‬
‫*‪47LM669‬‬
‫**‪55LM66‬‬
‫‪47LM6610-TB‬‬
‫‪47LM661Y-TB‬‬
‫‪47LM6690-TC‬‬
‫‪47LM669Y-TC‬‬
‫‪55LM6600-TA‬‬
‫‪55LM6610-TB‬‬
‫‪55LM660Y-TA‬‬
‫‪55LM661Y-TB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪263.0 x 701.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫‪269.0 x 692.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫‪331.0 x 795.0 x 1232.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫‪33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫‪33.6 x 723.0 x 1232.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪17.4‬‬
‫‪17.7‬‬
‫‪25.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪15.2‬‬
‫‪15.2‬‬
‫‪21.3‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫**‪42LM67‬‬
‫**‪47LM67‬‬
‫**‪55LM67‬‬
‫‪42LM6700-TA‬‬
‫‪42LM6710-TB‬‬
‫‪42LM670Y-TA‬‬
‫‪42LM671Y-TB‬‬
‫‪47LM6700-TA‬‬
‫‪47LM6710-TB‬‬
‫‪47LM670Y-TA‬‬
‫‪47LM671Y-TB‬‬
‫‪55LM6700-TA‬‬
‫‪55LM6710-TB‬‬
‫‪55LM670Y-TA‬‬
‫‪55LM671Y-TB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪263.0 x 636.0 x 953.0‬‬
‫‪263.0 x 701.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫‪331.0 x 795.0 x 1232.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪33.4 x 566.0 x 953.0‬‬
‫‪33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫‪33.6 x 723.0 x 1232.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪14.8‬‬
‫‪17.5‬‬
‫‪25.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪12.6‬‬
‫‪15.3‬‬
‫‪21.3‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫**‪42LM76‬‬
‫**‪47LM76‬‬
‫**‪55LM76‬‬
‫‪42LM7600-TA‬‬
‫‪42LM7610-TB‬‬
‫‪42LM760Y-TA‬‬
‫‪42LM761Y-TB‬‬
‫‪47LM7600-TA‬‬
‫‪47LM7610-TB‬‬
‫‪47LM760Y-TA‬‬
‫‪47LM761Y-TB‬‬
‫‪55LM7600-TA‬‬
‫‪55LM7610-TB‬‬
‫‪55LM760Y-TA‬‬
‫‪55LM761Y-TB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪263.0 x 636.0 x 953.0‬‬
‫‪263.0 x 701.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫‪331.0 x 795.0 x 1232.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪33.4 x 566.0 x 953.0‬‬
‫‪33.4 x 628.0 x 1063.0‬‬
‫‪33.6 x 723.0 x 1232.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪15.0‬‬
‫‪17.5‬‬
‫‪25.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫‪12.8‬‬
‫‪15.3‬‬
‫‪21.3‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 80‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‬
‫‪ 60‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪-20‬‬
‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 85‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ‪37‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪32LM6200-TA‬‬
‫‪32LM620Y-TA‬‬
‫‪42LM6200-TA‬‬
‫‪42LM620Y-TA‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪204.0 X 528.0 x 746.0‬‬
‫‪269.0 x 660.0 x 979.0‬‬
‫‪269.0 x 722.0 x 1089.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪35.5 X 462.0 x 746.0‬‬
‫‪35.5 x 594.0 x 979.0‬‬
‫‪35.5 x 655.0 x 1089.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪9.8‬‬
‫‪15.6‬‬
‫‪18.1‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪8.5‬‬
‫‪13.1‬‬
‫‪15.6‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫**‪55LM62‬‬
‫‪55LM6200-TA‬‬
‫‪55LM620Y-TA‬‬
‫**‪65LM62‬‬
‫‪65LM6200-TA‬‬
‫‪65LM620Y-TA‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪315.0 x 822.0 x 1263.0‬‬
‫‪354.0 x 993.0 x 1539.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪35.5 x 754.0 x 1263.0‬‬
‫‪38.1 x 924.0 x 1539.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪25.5‬‬
‫‪45.8‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪21.9‬‬
‫‪40.6‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 HZ‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 HZ‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫**‪32LM64‬‬
‫**‪42LM64‬‬
‫**‪47LM64‬‬
‫‪32LM6400-TA‬‬
‫‪32LM640Y-TA‬‬
‫‪32LM6410-TB‬‬
‫‪32LM641Y-TB‬‬
‫‪42LM6400-TA‬‬
‫‪42LM640Y-TA‬‬
‫‪42LM6410-TB‬‬
‫‪42LM641Y-TB‬‬
‫‪47LM6400-TA‬‬
‫‪47LM640Y-TA‬‬
‫‪47LM6410-TB‬‬
‫‪47LM641Y-TB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪225.0 x 502.0 x 729.0‬‬
‫‪263.0 x 644.9 x 964.0‬‬
‫‪263.0 x 705.0 x 1073.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪35.9 x 444.0 x 729.0‬‬
‫‪35.7 x 577.7 x 964.0‬‬
‫‪35.7 x 639.0 x 1073.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪9.4‬‬
‫‪14.3‬‬
‫‪16.9‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪7.8‬‬
‫‪12.1‬‬
‫‪14.7‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫**‪55LM64‬‬
‫‪55LM6400-TA‬‬
‫‪55LM640Y-TA‬‬
‫‪55LM6410-TB‬‬
‫‪55LM641Y-TB‬‬
‫**‪60LM64‬‬
‫*‪32LM660‬‬
‫‪60LM6450-TA‬‬
‫‪60LM645Y-TA‬‬
‫‪32LM6600-TA‬‬
‫‪32LM660Y-TA‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪331.0 x 799.5 x 1243.2‬‬
‫‪334.7 x 905.2 x 1391.1‬‬
‫‪225.0 x 587.0 x 855.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪36.0 x 735.0 x 1243.2‬‬
‫‪52.5 x 835.5 x 1391.1‬‬
‫‪35.6 x 524.0 x 855.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪24.7‬‬
‫‪42.6‬‬
‫‪9.5‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪21.0‬‬
‫‪38.5‬‬
‫‪8.0‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫**‪32LM661‬‬
‫‪32LM6610-TB‬‬
‫‪32LM661Y-TB‬‬
‫*‪32LM669‬‬
‫‪32LM6690-TC‬‬
‫‪32LM669Y-TC‬‬
‫*‪42LM660‬‬
‫‪42LM6600-TA‬‬
‫‪42LM660Y-TA‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪225.0 x 587.0 x 855.0‬‬
‫‪204.0 x 499.0 x 719.0‬‬
‫‪263.0 x 636.0 x 953.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫‪35.6 x 524.0 x 855.0‬‬
‫‪35.6 x 435.0 x 719.0‬‬
‫‪33.4 x 566.0 x 953.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪9.5‬‬
‫‪9.5‬‬
‫‪14.8‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‬
‫‪8.0‬‬
‫‪8.0‬‬
‫‪12.6‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫‪AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫**‪32LM62‬‬
‫**‪42LM62‬‬
‫**‪47LM62‬‬
‫‪47LM6200-TA‬‬
‫‪47LM620Y-TA‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺎژﻭﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ )‪(WN8122E‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺎژﻭﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ )‪(BM-LDS302‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ(‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ‪ /‬ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ )ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ( ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫• ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺜﻴﻔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺜﻴﻔﯽ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺁﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺸﻚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻙ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻫﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺧﺶ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺜﻴﻔﯽ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ (‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ) .‬ﺑﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫"ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻧﻴﺴﺖ"ﻳﺎ"‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮﺍﺳﺖ"ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RGB/HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
34
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
1
User Guide
OPTION > To set language
HOME Settings ¨ OPTION ¨ Language
Selects Menu Language and Audio Language displayed on the screen.
.‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
Menu Language Selects a language for the display text.
PROGRAMME Setting
HOME ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ‬User Guide ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
.‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
[In Digital Mode Only]
Audio Language When watching a digital broadcast containing several
audio languages, you can select the language you want.
PICTURE, SOUND Setting
Subtitle
Language
OPTION
[In Digital Mode Only]
Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle
languages are broadcast.
✎ If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast,
the default language subtitle will be displayed.
LG SMART Function
Advanced Function
2
Information
Try Now
3
Zoom In
Close
HOME Settings ¨ OPTION ¨ Language
Selects Menu Language and Audio Language displayed on the screen.
Menu Language Selects a language for the display text.
[In Digital Mode Only]
Audio Language When watching a digital broadcast containing several
audio languages, you can select the language you want.
[In Digital Mode Only]
Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle
Subtitle
languages are broadcast.
Language
✎ If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast,
the default language subtitle will be displayed.
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
Try Now
3
Zoom Out
Close
.‫ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬1
.‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ꕌ/ꕍ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫(ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬User Guide) ‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
.‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
3
1
4
‫ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬2
.‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬3
2
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ‬1
.‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬2
.‫ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬3
‫ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ꕌ/ꕍ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
.‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬4
.‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
1
2
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
.‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﻚ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ‪33‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ )ﺛﺒﺖ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫‪BACK‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪BACK‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ HOME‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ “ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ“ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻱ ‪ BACK‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫«‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫«‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻓﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫)‪ 2/4‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮐﺴﺲ ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﮐﺴﺲ ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ "‪".Magic Remote Control battery is low. Change the battery‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی )‪ 1.5‬ﻭﻟﺖ ‪(AA‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮ ﻭ ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ‪(RF‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪BACK‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺟﻬﺖ )ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ /‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪ /‬ﭼﭗ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ꕌPꕍ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MUTE‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MY APPS‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3D‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪11-1 Brief Info Title Test...‬‬
‫‪Info.‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪MY APPS‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪My Apps‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫)‪(POWER‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪BACK‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ‪ My Apps‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪31‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ **‪(LM76**, LM67**, LM661*, LM660*, LM64**, LM62‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺒﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪MY APPS‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ )ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ /‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪ /‬ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(Back‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪GUIDE‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪RATIO‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫‪TV/‬‬
‫‪RAD‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Q.VIEW‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪LIST‬‬
‫‪FAV‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪MUTE‬‬
‫‪SETTINGS‬‬
‫‪MY APPS‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪GUIDE‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU‬‬
‫‪T.OPT‬‬
‫‪TEXT‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪LIVE TV‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫‪ENERGY‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪SAVING‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫)‪(User Guide‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪RATIO‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ‪ DTV‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV/RAD‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪LIST‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪Q.VIEW‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪FAV‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪3D‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪PAGE‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SETTINGS‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺑﯽ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫) ‪ :‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Q. MENU‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﺩﻧﺴﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪LIVE TV‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫(‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ)‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی )‪ (MY MEDIA‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ DVR‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ENERGY SAVING‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ‪ 1/5‬ﻭﻟﺖ)‪ (AAA‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮ ﻭ ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ *‪(LM669‬‬
‫‪3D‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV/RAD‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪GUIDE‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Q. MENU‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ‪ DTV‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪LIST‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪Q.VIEW‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪POWER‬‬
‫‪TV/RAD‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU‬‬
‫‪Q.VIEW‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪GUIDE‬‬
‫‪LIST‬‬
‫‪MY APPS‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪FAV‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪MUTE‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪LIVE TV‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺒﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪MY APPS‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ )ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ /‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪ /‬ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(Back‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫‪T.OPT‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪TEXT‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪FAV‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(User Guide‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪PAGE‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺑﯽ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫) ‪ :‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪LIVE TV‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫(‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ)‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی )‪ (MY MEDIA‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ DVR‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪29‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ‪ USB‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮﻓﻠﺶ ﻣﻤﻮﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Smart Share‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪3 USB Apps‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪1 HDD IN‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB IN‬‬
‫‪2 USB Hub‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪Hub‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ ،USB Hub‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ USB IN 2 USB Hub‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ USB Hub‬ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ USB Hub‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪OPTICAL AUDIO IN‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ‪) ACP‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ( ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪AV‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫)ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫‪DVD/ Blu-Ray /‬‬
‫‪HD Cable Box‬‬
‫ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪( .‬‬
‫ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫)ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪PB‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫‪PB‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪AV‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪L (MONO) AUDIO R‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VCR / DVD / Blu-Ray‬‬
‫‪/ HD Cable Box‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪27‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ DVI-HDMI‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﻪ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪RGB-PC‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪4 (PC‬‬
‫)‪(RGB/HDMI-PC‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫)‪(PC‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫)‪(RGB/HDMI-PC‬‬
‫)‪1(ARC‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪RGB OUT (PC) AUDIO OUT‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪DVI OUT‬‬
‫‪AUDIO OUT‬‬
‫‪DVD/ Blu-Ray / HD Cable Box / PC‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ‪DVI‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ DOS‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ DVI-HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ HDMI IN 4‬ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫)‪4 (PC‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪DVD/ Blu-Ray / HD‬‬
‫‪Cable Box / HD‬‬
‫‪STB / PC‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪1(ARC‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪) CEC‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪1080p‬ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ‪ DTV‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪ HDMI‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪) ARC‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﻭ‪ARC‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪HDMI IN 1‬‬
‫)‪ (ARC‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ARC‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ‪ SPDIF‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫•ﻭﻧﻴﺰ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻝ ** ‪LM76‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪ 75‬ﺍﻫﻢ( ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪ANTENNA/CABLE‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪ :‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ ، HD‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ ، DVD‬ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ ، USB‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮐﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺣﻴﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﭙﻴﻠﻴﺘﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻘﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﻳﺐ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ VESA‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪VESA‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﭙﻴﺴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﭙﻴﺴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﭙﻴﺴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺧﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ( ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ(‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺍﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪23‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ VESA‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻗﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی(‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪(A x B) VESA‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫‪200 x 200‬‬
‫‪M6‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪LSW200BX‬‬
‫‪LSW220BX‬‬
‫‪400 x 400‬‬
‫‪M6‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪LSW400BX‬‬
‫‪LSW420BX‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮐﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩ ﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪(A x B) VESA‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬
‫**‪65LM62‬‬
‫‪600 x 400‬‬
‫‪M8‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪LSW600B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪LSW620B‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ‪ 20‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ‪ 10‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫*‬
‫(‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫‪M4 x 8‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﮔﻴﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2EA‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪*,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫(‬
‫>ﺟﻠﻮ<‬
‫>ﻋﻘﺐ<‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪21‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮی )ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ( ﺍﺯ‬‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﻟﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ) .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ(‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯﺣﺪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺮﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘ‬
‫ﯽﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫‪, 32/‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪M4 x 20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪M4 x 20‬‬
‫‪4EA‬‬
‫‪4EA‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪M4 x 20‬‬
‫‪M4 x 20‬‬
‫‪4EA‬‬
‫‪4EA‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪19‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪M4 x 20‬‬
‫‪4EA‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪M4 x 20‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪4EA‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪M4 x 20‬‬
‫‪4EA‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪M4 x 20‬‬
‫‪4EA‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪17‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 2‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻬﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
‫• ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻒ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺏ‪:‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺲ ﮔﺮﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪SETTINGS‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫ﺣﺲ ﮔﺮﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫‪SETTINGS‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪OKꔉ‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪ SETTINGS‬ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫‪I/‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺮﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺲ ﮔﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ -‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺏ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) OPTION‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪15‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ‪Dual play‬‬
‫‪AN-MR300‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪Dual play‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎی ‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪AN-WF100‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ‪Dual play‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎی ‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪AN-MR300‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫•‬
‫‪AN-WF100‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺸﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ /‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 20 ,18‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ /‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 20 ,19‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ‪ GND‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫« ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ‪ GND‬ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫« ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖ‬
‫‪ANTENNA/‬‬
‫‪CABLE IN‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‪ /‬ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺖ ﺗﺎپ ﺑﺎﮐﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ /‬ﺟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺖ ﺗﺎپ ﺑﺎﮐﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ -‬ﻭﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻮﺍﮐﺴﻴﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫)ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ‪ EN 60728-11‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ ، RF‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭی ﺍﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪13‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ )‪(AA‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ENERGY AV MODE INPUT‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪SAVING‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪FLASHBK‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪MARK‬‬
‫‪LIST‬‬
‫‪FAV‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫‪3D‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪MUTE‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU‬‬
‫‪MENU INFO‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪L/R SELECT‬‬
‫‪FREEZE‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪(AAA‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 31 ,30‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫(‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 32‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻼ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 28‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 28‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎی ‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ‪Dual play‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 24‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪M4 x 20, 8 EA‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 20, 19 ,18‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی‬
‫)‪ : 1EA‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)‪ : 2EA‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 22‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی‬
‫‪2EA‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫(‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 22‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ‬
‫‪M4 x 8, 2 EA‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫(‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 22‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﭙﻴﺴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬
‫‪4EA‬‬
‫(‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 24‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 14‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪RATIO‬‬
‫‪BACK‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ /‬ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﺭی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﺯﮐﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﺍﺯ ‪ 18‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫< ‪mm 10‬‬
‫*)‪= (A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫< ‪mm 18‬‬
‫*)‪= (B‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ‪11‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪ /‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻮﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﺠﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬‫)ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ( ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺷﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺴﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺴﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﺟﻮﺍﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﻧﻮﺟﻮﺍﻧﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 19‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺶ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ‬‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻜﺸﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﻦ‬
‫ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺷﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﺭﻳﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ‬‫ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی(‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺯﺍی ﻫﺮ ‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﻨﺠﺮ‬‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺩﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﮔﻴﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺰﻣﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﻬﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﻳﻬﺎی ﻣﺰﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺻﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭی ﻫﺎی ﻗﻠﺒﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻚ ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻒ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻜﻤﺎﺗﻴﺴﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺩﻳﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﮐﺎﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﺋﻤﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﺩﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﮔﻴﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﭙﺶ ﻗﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭی ﭼﺸﻢ‪،‬‬‫ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﻴﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺫﻳﺖ ﭼﺸﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻤﻜﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻤﯽ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﺴﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﻜﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫)ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺁﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ( ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻮﺩﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪ /‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﺭﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﯽ(ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﻝ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻼﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 4:3‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﺮﻕ ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﺮﻙ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﻘﺒﺎﺽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻭﺯ ﻭﺯ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ‪ /‬ﻫﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍی‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻤﺪ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻓﺮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﻍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺛﺮی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﻍ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺛﺮی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻻی ﺩﺭﺏ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮی‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻕ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﮐﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺳﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺘﯽ(‬
‫• ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺮﺗﻌﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪) VESA‬ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ )ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮی ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ 5‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 7‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﺭﻳﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻧﻮ ﻭ ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻣﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬‫ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬‫ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬‫ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﻭی ﺁﺏ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﮐﻬﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﻠﻌﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻫﺎﺩی ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺑﺮﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﯽ ﺩﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻠﺰی ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺳﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺠﺎﻕ ﺳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻭ ﮐﺒﺮﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ )ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍی ﻃﻮﻓﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺑﺮﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺿﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺿﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺷﻮﻓﺎژ‪ ،‬ﺷﻮﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺁﺏ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺸﻚ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺨﺎﺭی ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﺭی ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی ‪ www.lg.com‬ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪ DivX® :DIVX VIDEO‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻪ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ‪ .Rovi‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی ‪ divx.com‬ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ :DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ DivX VOD‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی ‪ divx.com‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫" ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ®‪ DivX‬ﺗﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪ HD 1080p‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺟﺰﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ‪ Rovi Corporation‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻫﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪"7,295,673;7,460,668;7,515,710;7,519,274,‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﻖ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ ‪5,956,674;5,974,380;6,487,535 :‬‬
‫‪ ، DTS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪DTS‬ﻭ ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ DTS 2.0+Digital Out‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ‪ DTS,Inc h‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ DTS,Inc‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺪ ‪ GPL‬ﻭ ‪ LGPL‬ﻭ ‪ MPL‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻤﺎی‬
‫‪ http://opensource.lge.com‬ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻟﻮﺡ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍی ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ [email protected]‬ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻻﺑﺮﺍﺗﻮﺁﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻟﺒﯽ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ Dolby‬ﻭ ‪ D‬ﺟﺰﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻻﺑﺮﺍﺗﻮﺁﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻟﺒﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬‫‪ -‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی(‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﻪ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪RGB-PC‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺮگ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﻚ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪LCD LED‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫**‪LM62‬‬
‫**‪LM64‬‬
‫**‪LM66‬‬
‫**‪LM67‬‬
‫**‪LM76‬‬
‫‪www.lg.com‬‬

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Key Features

  • 106.7 cm (42") Edge-LED
  • Full HD 1920 x 1080 pixels
  • TruMotion 100 Hz
  • DVB-T
  • Smart TV Internet TV
  • Ethernet LAN

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement